sim:
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
ad22bfe8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54
NC
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
ad22bfe8 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d
NC
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54
NC
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 121section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
252b5132
RH
468@cindex dynamic symbol table
469@kindex -E
470@kindex --export-dynamic
471@item -E
472@itemx --export-dynamic
473When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
474dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
475which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
476
477If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
478contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
479mentioned in the link.
480
481If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
482back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
483dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
484linking the program itself.
485
55255dae 486You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 487be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 488See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 489
36f63dca 490@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
491@cindex big-endian objects
492@cindex endianness
493@kindex -EB
494@item -EB
495Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
496
497@cindex little-endian objects
498@kindex -EL
499@item -EL
500Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 501@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
502
503@kindex -f
504@kindex --auxiliary
505@item -f
506@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
507When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
508to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
509table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
510symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
511
512If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
513run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
514the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
515first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
516@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
517in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
518Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
519implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
520machine specific performance.
521
522This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
523will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
524
525@kindex -F
526@kindex --filter
527@item -F @var{name}
528@itemx --filter @var{name}
529When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
530the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
531of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
532on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
533
534If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
535run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
536dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
537filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
538found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
539used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
540@var{name}.
541
ff5dcc92 542Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 543toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
544object files.
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 547@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 548@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
549environment variable.
550@end ifclear
551The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
552creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 553
3dbf70a2
MM
554@cindex finalization function
555@kindex -fini
556@item -fini @var{name}
557When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
558executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
559address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
560the function to call.
561
252b5132
RH
562@kindex -g
563@item -g
564Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
565
566@kindex -G
567@kindex --gpsize
568@cindex object size
569@item -G@var{value}
570@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
571Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
572@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
573MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
574sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
575
576@cindex runtime library name
577@kindex -h@var{name}
578@kindex -soname=@var{name}
579@item -h@var{name}
580@itemx -soname=@var{name}
581When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
582the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
583which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
584linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
585field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
586
587@kindex -i
588@cindex incremental link
589@item -i
590Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
591
3dbf70a2
MM
592@cindex initialization function
593@kindex -init
594@item -init @var{name}
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
597of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
598function to call.
599
252b5132 600@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
601@kindex -l@var{namespec}
602@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
603@item -l@var{namespec}
604@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
605Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
606list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
607If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
608will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
609will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 610
ff5dcc92 611On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
612files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
613and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
614called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
615@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
616indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
617to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
618@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
619
620The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
621specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
622was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
623command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
624archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
625the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
626
ff5dcc92 627See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
628archives multiple times.
629
630You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
631
632@ifset GENERIC
633This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 634if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
635behaviour of the AIX linker.
636@end ifset
637
638@cindex search directory, from cmd line
639@kindex -L@var{dir}
640@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 641@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 642@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
643Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
644for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
645option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
646in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
647on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 648@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
649order in which the options appear.
650
9c8ebd6a
DJ
651If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
652by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
653
252b5132
RH
654@ifset UsesEnvVars
655The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 656@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
657some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
658@end ifset
659
660The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
661@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
662at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
663
664@cindex emulation
665@kindex -m @var{emulation}
666@item -m@var{emulation}
667Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
668emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
669
670If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
671@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
672
673Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
674configured.
675
676@cindex link map
677@kindex -M
678@kindex --print-map
679@item -M
680@itemx --print-map
681Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
682information about the link, including the following:
683
684@itemize @bullet
685@item
3b83e13a 686Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
687@item
688How common symbols are allocated.
689@item
690All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
691which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
692@item
693The values assigned to symbols.
694
695Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
696involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
697have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
698linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
699of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
700the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
701linker script containing:
702
703@smallexample
704 foo = 1
705 foo = foo * 4
706 foo = foo + 8
707@end smallexample
708
709will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
710option is used:
711
712@smallexample
713 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
714 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
715 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
716@end smallexample
717
718See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
719scripts.
252b5132
RH
720@end itemize
721
722@kindex -n
723@cindex read-only text
724@cindex NMAGIC
725@kindex --nmagic
726@item -n
727@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 728Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 729@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
730
731@kindex -N
732@kindex --omagic
733@cindex read/write from cmd line
734@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 735@item -N
252b5132
RH
736@itemx --omagic
737Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
738not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
739libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
740mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
741is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
742specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
743
744@kindex --no-omagic
745@cindex OMAGIC
746@item --no-omagic
747This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
748sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
749be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
750shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
751
752@kindex -o @var{output}
753@kindex --output=@var{output}
754@cindex naming the output file
755@item -o @var{output}
756@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 757Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
758option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
759script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
760
761@kindex -O @var{level}
762@cindex generating optimized output
763@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 764If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 765the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
766should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
767option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
768the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
769no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
770of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 771
a712da20
NC
772@kindex -q
773@kindex --emit-relocs
774@cindex retain relocations in final executable
775@item -q
776@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 777Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
778Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
779order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
780in larger executables.
781
dbab7a7b
NC
782This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
783
4f471f39
RS
784@kindex --force-dynamic
785@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
786@item --force-dynamic
787Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
788to VxWorks targets.
789
252b5132
RH
790@cindex partial link
791@cindex relocatable output
792@kindex -r
1049f94e 793@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 794@item -r
1049f94e 795@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 796Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 797turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
798linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
799magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
800@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 801@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
802If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
803linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
804constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
805
62bf86b4
HPN
806When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
807partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
808relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
809example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
810with input files in other formats at all.
811
252b5132
RH
812This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
813
814@kindex -R @var{file}
815@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
816@cindex symbol-only input
817@item -R @var{filename}
818@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
819Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
820relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
821to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
822programs. You may use this option more than once.
823
ff5dcc92 824For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 825followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 826the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
827
828@kindex -s
829@kindex --strip-all
830@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 831@item -s
252b5132
RH
832@itemx --strip-all
833Omit all symbol information from the output file.
834
835@kindex -S
836@kindex --strip-debug
837@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 838@item -S
252b5132
RH
839@itemx --strip-debug
840Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
841
842@kindex -t
843@kindex --trace
844@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 845@item -t
252b5132 846@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 847Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
848
849@kindex -T @var{script}
850@kindex --script=@var{script}
851@cindex script files
852@item -T @var{scriptfile}
853@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
854Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 855@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 856@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
857output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
858the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
859specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
860options accumulate.
252b5132 861
14be8564
L
862@kindex -dT @var{script}
863@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
868
869This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
870processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
871command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
872@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
873behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
874command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
875the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
876@samp{gcc}).
877
252b5132
RH
878@kindex -u @var{symbol}
879@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
880@cindex undefined symbol
881@item -u @var{symbol}
882@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
883Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
884symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
885modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
886different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
887option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
888
889@kindex -Ur
890@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 891@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
892For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
893@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 894turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
895@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
896It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
897with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
898be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
899@samp{-r} for the others.
900
577a0623
AM
901@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
902@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
903Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
904@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
905missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
906specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
907multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
908input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
909in a linker script.
a854a4a7 910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -v
912@kindex -V
913@kindex --version
914@cindex version
915@item -v
916@itemx --version
917@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 918Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
919lists the supported emulations.
920
921@kindex -x
922@kindex --discard-all
923@cindex deleting local symbols
924@item -x
925@itemx --discard-all
926Delete all local symbols.
927
928@kindex -X
929@kindex --discard-locals
930@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 931@item -X
252b5132 932@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
933Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
934system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
935or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
936
937@kindex -y @var{symbol}
938@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
939@cindex symbol tracing
940@item -y @var{symbol}
941@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
942Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
943option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
944to prepend an underscore.
945
946This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
947don't know where the reference is coming from.
948
949@kindex -Y @var{path}
950@item -Y @var{path}
951Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
952for Solaris compatibility.
953
954@kindex -z @var{keyword}
955@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
956The recognized keywords are:
957@table @samp
958
959@item combreloc
960Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
961lookup caching possible.
962
963@item defs
560e09e9 964Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 965shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 966
6aa29e7b
JJ
967@item execstack
968Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
969
cd6d6c15
NC
970@item initfirst
971This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
972It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
973before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
974the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
975the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
976objects.
977
978@item interpose
979Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
980but the primary executable.
981
5fa222e4
AM
982@item lazy
983When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
984dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
985the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
986Lazy binding is the default.
987
cd6d6c15
NC
988@item loadfltr
989Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
990runtime.
991
992@item muldefs
993Allows multiple definitions.
994
995@item nocombreloc
996Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
997
998@item nocopyreloc
999Disables production of copy relocs.
1000
1001@item nodefaultlib
1002Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1003ignore any default library search paths.
1004
1005@item nodelete
1006Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1007
1008@item nodlopen
1009Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1010
1011@item nodump
1012Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1013
6aa29e7b
JJ
1014@item noexecstack
1015Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1016
1017@item norelro
1018Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1019
cd6d6c15
NC
1020@item now
1021When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1022dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1023when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1024deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1025first called.
1026
1027@item origin
1028Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1029
6aa29e7b
JJ
1030@item relro
1031Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
24718e3b
L
1033@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1034Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1035
1036@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1037Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1038
cd6d6c15
NC
1039@end table
1040
ece2d90e 1041Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1042
1043@kindex -(
1044@cindex groups of archives
1045@item -( @var{archives} -)
1046@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1047The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1048either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1049
1050The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1051references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1052the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1053archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1054object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1055would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1056they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1057resolved.
1058
1059Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1060it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1061more archives.
1062
69da35b5
NC
1063@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1064@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1065@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1066@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1067Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1068recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1069and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1070the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1071behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1072so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1073restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1074
4a43e768
AM
1075@kindex --as-needed
1076@kindex --no-as-needed
1077@item --as-needed
1078@itemx --no-as-needed
1079This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1080on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1081the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1082on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1083needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1084for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1085which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1086@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1087
e56f61be
L
1088@kindex --add-needed
1089@kindex --no-add-needed
1090@item --add-needed
1091@itemx --no-add-needed
1092This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1093DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1094the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1095a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1096@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1097for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1098the default behaviour.
1099
252b5132
RH
1100@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1101@item -assert @var{keyword}
1102This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1103
1104@kindex -Bdynamic
1105@kindex -dy
1106@kindex -call_shared
1107@item -Bdynamic
1108@itemx -dy
1109@itemx -call_shared
1110Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1111for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1112default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1113for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1114multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1115@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1116
a1ab1d2a
UD
1117@kindex -Bgroup
1118@item -Bgroup
1119Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1120section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1121object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1122@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1123only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -Bstatic
1126@kindex -dn
1127@kindex -non_shared
1128@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1129@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1130@itemx -dn
1131@itemx -non_shared
1132@itemx -static
1133Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1134platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1135variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1136may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1137library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1138option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1139option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1140shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1141references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1142libraries.
252b5132
RH
1143
1144@kindex -Bsymbolic
1145@item -Bsymbolic
1146When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1147definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1148for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1149within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1150platforms which support shared libraries.
1151
40b36307
L
1152@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1153@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1154When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1155symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1156This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1157libraries.
1158
55255dae
L
1159@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1160@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1161Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1162typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1163global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1164within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1165to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1166in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1167which support shared libraries.
1168
1169The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1170scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1171
40b36307
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1173@item --dynamic-list-data
1174Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1175
1176@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1177@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1178Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1179is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1180
0b8a70d9
L
1181@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1182@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1183Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1184
252b5132
RH
1185@kindex --check-sections
1186@kindex --no-check-sections
1187@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1188@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1189Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1190been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1191perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1192suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1193allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1194restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1195
1196@cindex cross reference table
1197@kindex --cref
1198@item --cref
1199Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1200generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1201Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1202
1203The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1204easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1205sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1206symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1207definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1208
4818e05f
AM
1209@cindex common allocation
1210@kindex --no-define-common
1211@item --no-define-common
1212This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1213The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1214@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1215
1216The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1217the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1218of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1219forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1220Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1221from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1222This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1223and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1224duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1225paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1226
252b5132
RH
1227@cindex symbols, from command line
1228@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1229@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1230Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1231address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1232times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1233limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1234context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1235symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1236constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1237using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1238Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1239space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1240@var{expression}.
1241
1242@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1243@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1244@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1245@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1246@itemx --no-demangle
1247These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1248and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1249present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1250underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1251mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1252different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1253to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1254demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1255is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1256
1257@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1258@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1259@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1260@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1261Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1262generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1263linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1264doing.
1265
7ce691ae 1266@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1267@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1268@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1269@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1270Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1271with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1272
252b5132
RH
1273@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1274@item --force-exe-suffix
1275Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1276
1277If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1278@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1279the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1280option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1281Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1282it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1283
1284@kindex --gc-sections
1285@kindex --no-gc-sections
1286@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1287@item --gc-sections
1288@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1289Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1290targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1291performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1292@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1293
d5465ba2
AM
1294@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1295examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1296symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1297command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1298referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1299libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1300referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1301the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1302relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1303
ac69cbc6
TG
1304This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1305@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1306specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1307a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1308
c17d87de
NC
1309@kindex --print-gc-sections
1310@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1311@cindex garbage collection
1312@item --print-gc-sections
1313@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1314List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1315printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1316collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1317default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1318be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1319line.
1320
252b5132
RH
1321@cindex help
1322@cindex usage
1323@kindex --help
1324@item --help
1325Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1326
ea20a7da
CC
1327@kindex --target-help
1328@item --target-help
1329Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1330
252b5132
RH
1331@kindex -Map
1332@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1333Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1334@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1335
1336@cindex memory usage
1337@kindex --no-keep-memory
1338@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1339@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1340symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1341instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1342necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1343while linking a large executable.
1344
1345@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1346@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1347@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1348@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1349Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1350is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1351The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1352behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1353libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1354
aa713662
L
1355@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1356@kindex -z muldefs
1357@item --allow-multiple-definition
1358@itemx -z muldefs
1359Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1360report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1361first definition will be used.
1362
b79e8c78 1363@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1364@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1365@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1366@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1367Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1368This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1369determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1370shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1371how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1372
1373The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1374the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1375the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1376resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1377undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1378them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1379for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1380select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1381for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1382
31941635
L
1383@kindex --no-undefined-version
1384@item --no-undefined-version
1385Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1386it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1387will be issued instead.
1388
3e3b46e5
PB
1389@kindex --default-symver
1390@item --default-symver
1391Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1392exported symbols.
1393
1394@kindex --default-imported-symver
1395@item --default-imported-symver
1396Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1397imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1398
252b5132
RH
1399@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1400@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1401Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1402files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1403been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1404This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1405errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1406have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1407inappropriate.
1408
fe7929ce
AM
1409@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1410@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1411Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1412library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1413
252b5132
RH
1414@kindex --no-whole-archive
1415@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1416Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1417archive files.
1418
1419@cindex output file after errors
1420@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1421@item --noinhibit-exec
1422Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1423Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1424errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1425when it issues any error whatsoever.
1426
0a9c1c8e
CD
1427@kindex -nostdlib
1428@item -nostdlib
1429Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1430command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1431(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1432
252b5132
RH
1433@ifclear SingleFormat
1434@kindex --oformat
1435@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1436@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1437file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1438@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1439object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1440object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1441should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1442usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1443name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1444list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1445command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1446this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1447@end ifclear
1448
36af4a4e
JJ
1449@kindex -pie
1450@kindex --pic-executable
1451@item -pie
1452@itemx --pic-executable
1453@cindex position independent executables
1454Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1455ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1456libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1457address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1458normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1459defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1460
252b5132
RH
1461@kindex -qmagic
1462@item -qmagic
1463This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1464
1465@kindex -Qy
1466@item -Qy
1467This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1468
1469@kindex --relax
1470@cindex synthesizing linker
1471@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1472@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1473An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1474@ifset GENERIC
1475This option is only supported on a few targets.
1476@end ifset
1477@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1478@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1479@end ifset
1480@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1481@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1482@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1483@ifset XTENSA
1484@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1485@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1486@ifset M68HC11
1487@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1488@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1489@ifset POWERPC
1490@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1491@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1492
1493On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1494optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1495in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1496instructions in the output object file.
1497
1498On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1499debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1500@ifset GENERIC
1501This is known to be
1502the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1503@end ifset
1504
1505@ifset GENERIC
1506On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1507but ignored.
1508@end ifset
1509
1510@cindex retaining specified symbols
1511@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1512@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1513@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1514Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1515discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1516symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1517@ifset GENERIC
1518(such as VxWorks)
1519@end ifset
1520where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1521run-time memory.
1522
1523@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1524or symbols needed for relocations.
1525
1526You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1527line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1528
1529@ifset GENERIC
1530@item -rpath @var{dir}
1531@cindex runtime library search path
1532@kindex -rpath
1533Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1534linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1535arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1536them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1537also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1538objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1539@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1540ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1541@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1542
ff5dcc92 1543The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1544SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1545@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1546runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1547options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1548gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1549file systems.
252b5132 1550
ff5dcc92 1551For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1552followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1553the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1554@end ifset
1555
1556@ifset GENERIC
1557@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1558@kindex -rpath-link
1559@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1560When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1561happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1562of the input files.
1563
1564When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1565non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1566shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1567explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1568specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1569@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1570either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1571appearing multiple times.
1572
28c309a2
NC
1573This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1574that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1575is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1576runtime linker would do.
1577
252b5132 1578The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1579libraries:
252b5132
RH
1580@enumerate
1581@item
ff5dcc92 1582Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1583@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1584Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1585between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1586specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1587used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1588at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1589by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1590the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1591@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1592On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1593@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1594environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1595@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1596On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1597directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1598@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1599For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1600variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1601@item
ec4eb78a
L
1602For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1603@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1604libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1605@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1606@item
252b5132
RH
1607The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1608@item
1609For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1610exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1611@end enumerate
1612
1613If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1614warning and continue with the link.
1615@end ifset
1616
1617@kindex -shared
1618@kindex -Bshareable
1619@item -shared
1620@itemx -Bshareable
1621@cindex shared libraries
1622Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1623and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1624shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1625undefined symbols in the link.
1626
de7dd2bd 1627@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1628@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1629This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1630ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1631sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1632eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1633between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1634specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1635
bcaa7b3e
L
1636@kindex --sort-section name
1637@item --sort-section name
1638This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1639patterns in the linker script.
1640
1641@kindex --sort-section alignment
1642@item --sort-section alignment
1643This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1644patterns in the linker script.
1645
252b5132 1646@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1647@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1648Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1649each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1650size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1651
1652@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1653@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1654Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1655output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1656This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1657certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1658cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1659that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1660support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1661input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1662more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1663many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1664
1665@kindex --stats
1666@item --stats
1667Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1668as execution time and memory usage.
1669
e2243057
RS
1670@kindex --sysroot
1671@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1672Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1673configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1674that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1675
252b5132
RH
1676@kindex --traditional-format
1677@cindex traditional format
1678@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1679For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1680the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1681use the traditional format instead.
1682
1683@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1684For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1685symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1686full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1687@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1688trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1689combine duplicate entries.
1690
176355da
NC
1691@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1692@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1693Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1694address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1695times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1696line.
1697@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1698for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1699@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1700should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1701sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1702
252b5132
RH
1703@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1704@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1705@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1706@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1707@item -Tbss @var{org}
1708@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1709@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1710Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1711@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1712
560e09e9
NC
1713@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1714@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1715Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1716values for @samp{method}:
1717
1718@table @samp
1719@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1720Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1721
1722@item report-all
da8bce14 1723Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1724
1725@item ignore-in-object-files
1726Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1727ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1728
1729@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1730Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1731ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1732when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1733libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1734command line.
1735@end table
1736
1737The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1738by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1739
1740Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1741unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1742can change this to a warning.
1743
252b5132
RH
1744@kindex --verbose
1745@cindex verbose
1746@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1747@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1748Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1749supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1750the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1751
1752@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1753@cindex version script, symbol versions
1754@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1755Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1756used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1757about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1758is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1759@xref{VERSION}.
1760
7ce691ae 1761@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1762@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1763@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1764@item --warn-common
1765Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1766a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1767but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1768you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1769Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1770warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1771
1772There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1773
1774@table @samp
1775@item int i = 1;
1776A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1777file.
1778
1779@item extern int i;
1780An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1781There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1782variable somewhere.
1783
1784@item int i;
1785A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1786variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1787The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1788single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1789size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1790a definition of the same variable.
1791@end table
1792
1793The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1794Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1795just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1796encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1797a common symbol.
1798
1799@enumerate
1800@item
1801Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1802definition for the symbol.
1803@smallexample
1804@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1805 overridden by definition
1806@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1807@end smallexample
1808
1809@item
1810Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1811the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1812except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1813@smallexample
1814@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1815 overriding common
1816@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1817@end smallexample
1818
1819@item
1820Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1821@smallexample
1822@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1823 of `@var{symbol}'
1824@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1825@end smallexample
1826
1827@item
1828Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1829@smallexample
1830@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1831 overridden by larger common
1832@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1833@end smallexample
1834
1835@item
1836Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1837the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1838encountered in a different order.
1839@smallexample
1840@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1841 overriding smaller common
1842@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1843@end smallexample
1844@end enumerate
1845
1846@kindex --warn-constructors
1847@item --warn-constructors
1848Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1849object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1850detect the use of global constructors.
1851
1852@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1853@item --warn-multiple-gp
1854Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1855This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1856Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1857section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1858of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1859base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1860base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1861bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1862large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1863values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1864option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1865
1866@kindex --warn-once
1867@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1868@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1869@item --warn-once
1870Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1871which refers to it.
1872
1873@kindex --warn-section-align
1874@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1875@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1876@item --warn-section-align
1877Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1878alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1879The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1880is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1881the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1882
8fdd7217
NC
1883@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1884@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1885Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1886
560e09e9
NC
1887@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1888@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1889If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1890@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1891This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1892
1893@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1894@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1895This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1896it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1897
252b5132
RH
1898@kindex --whole-archive
1899@cindex including an entire archive
1900@item --whole-archive
1901For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1902@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1903in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1904files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1905library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1906library. This option may be used more than once.
1907
7ec229ce 1908Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1909about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1910Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1911list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1912your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1913
252b5132
RH
1914@kindex --wrap
1915@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1916Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1917@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1918undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1919@var{symbol}.
1920
1921This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1922wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1923wishes to call the system function, it should call
1924@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1925
1926Here is a trivial example:
1927
1928@smallexample
1929void *
cc2f008e 1930__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1931@{
cc2f008e 1932 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1933 return __real_malloc (c);
1934@}
1935@end smallexample
1936
ff5dcc92 1937If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1938all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1939instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1940call the real @code{malloc} function.
1941
1942You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1943links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1944you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1945file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1946call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1947
6aa29e7b
JJ
1948@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1949@item --eh-frame-hdr
1950Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1951@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1952
6c1439be
L
1953@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1954@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1955@item --enable-new-dtags
1956@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1957This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1958systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1959@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1960If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1961created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1962those options are only available for ELF systems.
1963
2d643429 1964@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1965@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1966Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1967close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1968time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1969increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1970value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1971
fdc90cb4
JJ
1972@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1973@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1974Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1975@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1976new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1977the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1978hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1979
35835446
JR
1980@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1981@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1982This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1983linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1984for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1985about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1986
4f9c04f7 1987Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 19881021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 1989run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
1990has been used.
1991
1992The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
1993enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 1994
c0065db7
RM
1995@kindex --build-id
1996@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
1997@item --build-id
1998@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
1999Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2000The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2001file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2002@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2003parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2004@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2005@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2006an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2007characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2008omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2009
2010The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2011that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2012unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2013to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2014file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2015string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2016
2017Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2018@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2019@end table
2020
0285c67d
NC
2021@c man end
2022
36f63dca 2023@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2024
0285c67d
NC
2025@c man begin OPTIONS
2026
ff5dcc92 2027The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2028the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2029normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2030use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2031@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2032like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2033symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2034object file).
2035
2036In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2037support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2038PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2039values by either a space or an equals sign.
2040
ff5dcc92 2041@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2044@item --add-stdcall-alias
2045If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2046as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2047[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2048
2049@kindex --base-file
2050@item --base-file @var{file}
2051Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2052addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2053@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2054[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --dll
2057@item --dll
2058Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2059@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2060file.
bb10df36 2061[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2062
2063@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2064@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2065@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2066@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2067If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2068do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2069only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2070resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2071undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2072@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2073to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2074warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2075import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2076to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2077feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2078@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2079mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2080[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2081
2082@cindex DLLs, creating
2083@kindex --export-all-symbols
2084@item --export-all-symbols
2085If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2086be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2087otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2088explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2089attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2090option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2091@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2092@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2093exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2094re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2095such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2096@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2097@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2098Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2099not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2100extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2101(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2102These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2103@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2104@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2105@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2106@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2107[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2108
2109@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2110@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2111Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2112exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2113[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2114
2115@kindex --file-alignment
2116@item --file-alignment
2117Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2118file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2119512.
bb10df36 2120[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2121
2122@cindex heap size
2123@kindex --heap
2124@item --heap @var{reserve}
2125@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2126Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2127to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2128committed.
bb10df36 2129[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2130
2131@cindex image base
2132@kindex --image-base
2133@item --image-base @var{value}
2134Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2135the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2136is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2137your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2138other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2139for dlls.
bb10df36 2140[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2141
2142@kindex --kill-at
2143@item --kill-at
2144If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2145symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2146[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2147
26d2d8a2
BF
2148@kindex --large-address-aware
2149@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2150If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2151header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2152greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2153or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2154section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2155[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2156
252b5132
RH
2157@kindex --major-image-version
2158@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2159Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2160[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --major-os-version
2163@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2164Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2168@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2169Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2170[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2171
2172@kindex --minor-image-version
2173@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2174Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2175[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2176
2177@kindex --minor-os-version
2178@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2179Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2183@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2184Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2185[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@cindex DEF files, creating
2188@cindex DLLs, creating
2189@kindex --output-def
2190@item --output-def @var{file}
2191The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2192file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2193(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2194library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2195automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2197
b044cda1
CW
2198@cindex DLLs, creating
2199@kindex --out-implib
2200@item --out-implib @var{file}
2201The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2202import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2203import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2204may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2205makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2206creation step.
bb10df36 2207[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2208
2209@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2210@item --enable-auto-image-base
2211Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2212using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2213from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2214collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2215avoided.
bb10df36 2216[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2217
2218@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2219@item --disable-auto-image-base
2220Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2221user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2222default.
bb10df36 2223[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2224
2225@cindex DLLs, linking to
2226@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2227@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2228When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2229search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2230@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2231between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2232uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2233@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2234[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2235
2236@kindex --enable-auto-import
2237@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2238Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2239DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2240building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2241'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2242to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2243specification published by Microsoft.
2244
e2a83dd0
NC
2245Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2246data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2247placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2248around a problem with consts that is described here:
2249http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2250
4d8907ac
DS
2251Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2252see this message:
0d888aac 2253
ece2d90e 2254"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2255documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2256
ece2d90e
NC
2257This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2258ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2259allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2260fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2261constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2262multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2263this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2264of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2265the warning, and exit.
2266
2267There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2268data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2269
2fa9fc65
NC
2270One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2271of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2272this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2273
c0065db7
RM
2274A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2275that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2276there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2277a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2278
2279@example
2280extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2281extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2282 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2283@end example
2284
2285or
2286
2287@example
2288extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2289extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2290 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2291@end example
2292
c0065db7 2293For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2294is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2295
2296@example
2297extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2298extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2299 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2300@end example
2301
c406afaf
NC
2302or
2303
2304@example
2305extern long long extern_ll;
2306extern_ll -->
2307 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2308@end example
2309
2fa9fc65 2310A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2311'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2312@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2313requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2314building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2315merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2316between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2317constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2318
2319Original:
2320@example
2321--foo.h
2322extern int arr[];
2323--foo.c
2324#include "foo.h"
2325void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2326 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2327@}
2328@end example
2329
2330Solution 1:
2331@example
2332--foo.h
2333extern int arr[];
2334--foo.c
2335#include "foo.h"
2336void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2337 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2338 volatile int *parr = arr;
2339 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2340@}
2341@end example
2342
2343Solution 2:
2344@example
2345--foo.h
2346/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2347#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2348 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2349#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2350#else
2351#define FOO_IMPORT
2352#endif
2353extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2354--foo.c
2355#include "foo.h"
2356void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2357 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2358@}
2359@end example
2360
c0065db7 2361A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2362library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2363for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2364functions).
bb10df36 2365[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2366
2367@kindex --disable-auto-import
2368@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2369Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2370@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2372
2fa9fc65
NC
2373@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2374@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2375If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2376that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2377a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2378environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2380
2381@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2382@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2383Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2384DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2385[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2386
b044cda1
CW
2387@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2388@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2389Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2391
252b5132
RH
2392@kindex --section-alignment
2393@item --section-alignment
2394Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2395addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2396[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2397
2398@cindex stack size
2399@kindex --stack
2400@item --stack @var{reserve}
2401@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2402Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2403to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2404committed.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2406
2407@kindex --subsystem
2408@item --subsystem @var{which}
2409@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2410@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2411Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2412legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2413@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2414the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2415@var{which}.
bb10df36 2416[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2417
2418@end table
2419
0285c67d
NC
2420@c man end
2421
93fd0973
SC
2422@ifset M68HC11
2423@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2424
2425@c man begin OPTIONS
2426
2427The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2428memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2429
2430@table @gcctabopt
2431
2432@kindex --no-trampoline
2433@item --no-trampoline
2434This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2435is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2436instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2437
2438@kindex --bank-window
2439@item --bank-window @var{name}
2440This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2441the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2442The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2443paging and addresses within the memory window.
2444
2445@end table
2446
2447@c man end
2448@end ifset
2449
7fb9f789
NC
2450@ifset M68K
2451@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2452
2453@c man begin OPTIONS
2454
2455The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2456when linking for 68K targets.
2457
2458@table @gcctabopt
2459
2460@kindex --got
2461@item --got=@var{type}
2462This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2463@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2464@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2465Info entry for @file{ld}.
2466
2467@end table
2468
2469@c man end
2470@end ifset
2471
252b5132
RH
2472@ifset UsesEnvVars
2473@node Environment
2474@section Environment Variables
2475
0285c67d
NC
2476@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2477
560e09e9 2478You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2479@ifclear SingleFormat
2480@code{GNUTARGET},
2481@end ifclear
2482@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2483
36f63dca 2484@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2485@kindex GNUTARGET
2486@cindex default input format
2487@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2488use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2489of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2490@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2491of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2492attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2493this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2494there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2495object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2496BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2497in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2498@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2499
2500@kindex LDEMULATION
2501@cindex default emulation
2502@cindex emulation, default
2503@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2504@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2505behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2506available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2507the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2508variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2509linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2512@cindex demangling, default
2513Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2514@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2515default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2516a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2517may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2518options.
2519
0285c67d
NC
2520@c man end
2521@end ifset
2522
252b5132
RH
2523@node Scripts
2524@chapter Linker Scripts
2525
2526@cindex scripts
2527@cindex linker scripts
2528@cindex command files
2529Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2530written in the linker command language.
2531
2532The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2533the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2534the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2535more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2536direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2537described below.
2538
2539The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2540yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2541linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2542to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2543such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2544
2545You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2546line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2547default linker script.
2548
2549You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2550to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2551Linker Scripts}.
2552
2553@menu
2554* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2555* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2556* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2557* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2558* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2559* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2560* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2561* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2562* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2563* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2564* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2565@end menu
2566
2567@node Basic Script Concepts
2568@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2569@cindex linker script concepts
2570We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2571describe the linker script language.
2572
2573The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2574file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2575@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2576The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2577purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2578among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2579section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2580in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2581
2582Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2583also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2584contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2585the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2586A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2587area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2588loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2589which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2590of debugging information.
2591
2592Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2593first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2594the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2595@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2596section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2597same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2598is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2599(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2600based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2601RAM address would be the VMA.
2602
2603You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2604program with the @samp{-h} option.
2605
2606Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2607@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2608has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2609information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2610will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2611static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2612referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2613
2614You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2615program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2616option.
2617
2618@node Script Format
2619@section Linker Script Format
2620@cindex linker script format
2621Linker scripts are text files.
2622
2623You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2624either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2625symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2626generally ignored.
2627
2628Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2629If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2630otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2631double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2632file name.
2633
2634You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2635@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2636to whitespace.
2637
2638@node Simple Example
2639@section Simple Linker Script Example
2640@cindex linker script example
2641@cindex example of linker script
2642Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2643
2644The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2645@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2646memory layout of the output file.
2647
2648The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2649describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2650code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2651@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2652Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2653your input files.
2654
2655For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2657linker script which will do that:
2658@smallexample
2659SECTIONS
2660@{
2661 . = 0x10000;
2662 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2663 . = 0x8000000;
2664 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2665 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2666@}
2667@end smallexample
2668
2669You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2670followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2671descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2672
252b5132
RH
2673The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2674sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2675counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2676other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2677current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2678incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2679@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2680
2681The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2682required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2683after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2684which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2685wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2686means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2687
2688Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2689@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2690@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2691
2692The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2693the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2694at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2695output section, the value of the location counter will be
2696@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2697effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2698immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2699
2700The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2701alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2702example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2703sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2704may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2705sections.
2706
2707That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2708
2709@node Simple Commands
2710@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2711@cindex linker script simple commands
2712In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2713
2714@menu
2715* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2716* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2717@ifclear SingleFormat
2718* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2719@end ifclear
2720
2721* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2722@end menu
2723
2724@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2725@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2726@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2727@cindex start of execution
2728@cindex first instruction
2729@cindex entry point
2730The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2731point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2732entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2733@smallexample
2734ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2735@end smallexample
2736
2737There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2738entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2739stopping when one of them succeeds:
2740@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2741@item
252b5132 2742the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2743@item
252b5132 2744the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2745@item
252b5132 2746the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2747@item
252b5132 2748the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2749@item
252b5132
RH
2750The address @code{0}.
2751@end itemize
2752
2753@node File Commands
36f63dca 2754@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2755@cindex linker script file commands
2756Several linker script commands deal with files.
2757
2758@table @code
2759@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2760@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2761@cindex including a linker script
2762Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2763be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2764with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
276510 levels deep.
2766
2767@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2768@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2769@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2770@cindex input files in linker scripts
2771@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2772@cindex linker script input object files
2773The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2774in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2775
2776For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2777a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2778then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2779
2780In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2781script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2782
e3f2db7f
AO
2783In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2784with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2785located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2786for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2787open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2788linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2789description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2790
ff5dcc92 2791If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2792name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2793@samp{-l}.
2794
2795When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2796files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2797script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2798
2799@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2800@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2801@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2802@cindex grouping input files
2803The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2804files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2805new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2806in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2807
b717d30e
JJ
2808@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2809@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2810@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2811This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2812commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2813as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2814with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2815when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2816@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2817and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2818setting afterwards.
2819
252b5132
RH
2820@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2821@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2822@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2823The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2824@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2825@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2826Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2827precedence.
2828
2829You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2830output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2831
2832@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2833@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2834@cindex library search path in linker script
2835@cindex archive search path in linker script
2836@cindex search path in linker script
2837The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2838@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2839@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2840on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2841are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2842the command line option are searched first.
2843
2844@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2845@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2846@cindex first input file
2847The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2848that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2849though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2850when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2851first file.
2852@end table
2853
2854@ifclear SingleFormat
2855@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2856@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2857A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2858
2859@table @code
2860@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2861@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2862@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2863@cindex output file format in linker script
2864The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2865output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2866exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2867(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2868line option takes precedence.
2869
2870You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2871formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2872This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2873desired endianness.
2874
2875If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2876will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2877output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2878used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2879
2880For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2881command:
2882@smallexample
2883OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2884@end smallexample
2885This says that the default format for the output file is
2886@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2887option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2888format.
2889
2890@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2891@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2892@cindex input file format in linker script
2893The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2894files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2895This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2896(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2897is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2898command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2899@end table
2900@end ifclear
2901
2902@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2903@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2904There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2905
2906@table @code
2907@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2908@kindex ASSERT
2909@cindex assertion in linker script
2910Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2911with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2912
2913@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2914@kindex EXTERN
2915@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2916Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2917symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2918modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2919each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2920command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2921
2922@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2923@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2924@cindex common allocation in linker script
2925This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2926to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2927output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2928
4818e05f
AM
2929@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2930@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2931@cindex common allocation in linker script
2932This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2933command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2934to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2935
53d25da6
AM
2936@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2937@kindex INSERT
2938@cindex insert user script into default script
2939This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2940augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2941inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2942@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2943default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2944sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2945linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2946insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2947linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2948default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2949of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2950to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2951is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2952
2953@smallexample
2954SECTIONS
2955@{
2956 OVERLAY :
2957 @{
2958 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2959 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2960 @}
2961@}
2962INSERT AFTER .text;
2963@end smallexample
2964
252b5132
RH
2965@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2966@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2967@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2968This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2969references among certain output sections.
2970
2971In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2972using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2973will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2974errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2975a function defined in the other section.
2976
2977The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2978@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2979an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2980@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2981names.
2982
2983@ifclear SingleFormat
2984@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2985@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2986@cindex machine architecture
2987@cindex architecture
2988Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
2989of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
2990architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
2991the @samp{-f} option.
2992@end ifclear
2993@end table
2994
2995@node Assignments
2996@section Assigning Values to Symbols
2997@cindex assignment in scripts
2998@cindex symbol definition, scripts
2999@cindex variables, defining
3000You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3001the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3002
3003@menu
3004* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3005* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3006* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3007* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3008@end menu
3009
3010@node Simple Assignments
3011@subsection Simple Assignments
3012
3013You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3014
3015@table @code
3016@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3017@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3018@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3019@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3020@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3021@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3022@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3023@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3024@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3025@end table
3026
3027The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3028@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3029defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3030
3031The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3032may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3033
3034The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3035
3036Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3037
3038You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3039statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3040section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3041
3042The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3043expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3044
3045Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3046assignments may be used:
3047
3048@smallexample
3049floating_point = 0;
3050SECTIONS
3051@{
3052 .text :
3053 @{
3054 *(.text)
3055 _etext = .;
3056 @}
156e34dd 3057 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3058 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3059@}
3060@end smallexample
3061@noindent
3062In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3063zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3064the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3065defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3066upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3067
3068@node PROVIDE
3069@subsection PROVIDE
3070@cindex PROVIDE
3071In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3072only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3073the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3074@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3075@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3076@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3077@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3078@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3079
3080Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3081@smallexample
3082SECTIONS
3083@{
3084 .text :
3085 @{
3086 *(.text)
3087 _etext = .;
3088 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3089 @}
3090@}
3091@end smallexample
3092
3093In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3094underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3095the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3096underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3097If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3098linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3099
7af8e998
L
3100@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3101@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3102@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3103Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3104hidden and won't be exported.
3105
73ae6183
NC
3106@node Source Code Reference
3107@subsection Source Code Reference
3108
3109Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3110intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3111a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3112symbol that does not have a value.
3113
3114Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3115transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3116stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3117prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3118mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3119of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3120variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3121linker script variable might be referred to as:
3122
3123@smallexample
3124 extern int foo;
3125@end smallexample
3126
3127But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3128
3129@smallexample
3130 _foo = 1000;
3131@end smallexample
3132
3133In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3134transformation has taken place.
3135
3136When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3137things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3138in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3139second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3140table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3141contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3142value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3143
3144@smallexample
3145 int foo = 1000;
3146@end smallexample
3147
3148creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3149holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3150number 1000 is initially stored.
3151
3152When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3153first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3154memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3155So:
3156
3157@smallexample
3158 foo = 1;
3159@end smallexample
3160
3161looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3162associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3163address. Whereas:
3164
3165@smallexample
3166 int * a = & foo;
3167@end smallexample
3168
3169looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3170and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3171the variable @samp{a}.
3172
3173Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3174the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3175an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3176
3177@smallexample
3178 foo = 1000;
3179@end smallexample
3180
3181creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3182the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3183address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3184linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3185access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3186
3187Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3188you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3189use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3190section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3191linker script contains these declarations:
3192
3193@smallexample
3194@group
3195 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3196 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3197 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3198@end group
3199@end smallexample
3200
3201Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3202
3203@smallexample
3204@group
3205 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3206
73ae6183
NC
3207 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3208@end group
3209@end smallexample
3210
3211Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3212
252b5132 3213@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3214@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3215@kindex SECTIONS
3216The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3217into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3218
3219The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3220@smallexample
3221SECTIONS
3222@{
3223 @var{sections-command}
3224 @var{sections-command}
3225 @dots{}
3226@}
3227@end smallexample
3228
3229Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3230
3231@itemize @bullet
3232@item
3233an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3234@item
3235a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3236@item
3237an output section description
3238@item
3239an overlay description
3240@end itemize
3241
3242The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3243@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3244those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3245understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3246the layout of the output file.
3247
3248Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3249below.
3250
3251If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3252linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3253section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3254input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3255example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3256in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3257
3258@menu
3259* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3260* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3261* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3262* Input Section:: Input section description
3263* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3264* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3265* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3266* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3267* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3268@end menu
3269
3270@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3271@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3272The full description of an output section looks like this:
3273@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3274@group
7e7d5768 3275@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3276 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3277 @{
3278 @var{output-section-command}
3279 @var{output-section-command}
3280 @dots{}
562d3460 3281 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3282@end group
3283@end smallexample
3284
3285Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3286
3287The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3288name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3289The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3290
3291Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3292
3293@itemize @bullet
3294@item
3295a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3296@item
3297an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3298@item
3299data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3300@item
3301a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3302@end itemize
3303
3304@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3305@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3306@cindex name, section
3307@cindex section name
3308The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3309meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3310support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3311must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3312example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3313output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3314names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3315quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3316characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3317commas must be quoted.
3318
3319The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3320Discarding}.
3321
3322@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3323@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3324@cindex address, section
3325@cindex section address
3326The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3327address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3328the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3329based on the current value of the location counter.
3330
3331If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3332set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3333@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3334current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3335requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3336output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3337within the output section.
3338
3339For example,
3340@smallexample
3341.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3342@end smallexample
3343@noindent
3344and
3345@smallexample
3346.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3347@end smallexample
3348@noindent
3349are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3350@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3351counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3352counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3353section.
3354
3355The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3356For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3357so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3358do something like this:
3359@smallexample
3360.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3361@end smallexample
3362@noindent
3363This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3364aligned upward to the specified value.
3365
3366Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3367location counter.
3368
3369@node Input Section
36f63dca 3370@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3371@cindex input sections
3372@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3373The most common output section command is an input section description.
3374
3375The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3376You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3377in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3378map the input files into your memory layout.
3379
3380@menu
3381* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3382* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3383* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3384* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3385* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3386@end menu
3387
3388@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3389@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3390@cindex input section basics
3391An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3392by a list of section names in parentheses.
3393
3394The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3395describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3396
3397The most common input section description is to include all input
3398sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3399include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3400@smallexample
3401*(.text)
3402@end smallexample
3403@noindent
18625d54
CM
3404Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3405of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3406match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3407example:
252b5132 3408@smallexample
b4346c09 3409*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3410@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3411will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3412@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3413
3414There are two ways to include more than one section:
3415@smallexample
3416*(.text .rdata)
3417*(.text) *(.rdata)
3418@end smallexample
3419@noindent
3420The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3421@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3422first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3423they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3424@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3425@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3426
3427You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3428You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3429needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3430@smallexample
3431data.o(.data)
3432@end smallexample
3433
3434If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3435the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3436commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3437@smallexample
3438data.o
3439@end smallexample
3440
3441When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
3442characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3443name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3444did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3445though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3446@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3447the archive search path.
3448
3449@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3450@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3451@cindex input section wildcards
3452@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3453@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3454@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3455In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3456name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3457
3458The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3459pattern for the file name.
3460
3461The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3462
3463@table @samp
3464@item *
3465matches any number of characters
3466@item ?
3467matches any single character
3468@item [@var{chars}]
3469matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3470character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3471@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3472@item \
3473quotes the following character
3474@end table
3475
3476When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3477will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3478Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3479exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3480@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3481a @samp{/} character.
3482
3483File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3484specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3485does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3486
3487If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3488appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3489will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3490sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3491@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3492@smallexample
3493.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3494.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3495@end smallexample
3496
bcaa7b3e 3497@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3498Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3499in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3500this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3501pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3502@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3503into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3504
bcaa7b3e
L
3505@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3506@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3507difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3508ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3509
3510@cindex SORT
3511@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3512
3513When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3514can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3515
3516@enumerate
3517@item
3518@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3519It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3520sections have the same name.
3521@item
3522@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3523It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3524sections have the same alignment.
3525@item
c0065db7 3526@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3527treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3528@item
3529@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3530is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3531@item
3532All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3533@end enumerate
3534
3535When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3536section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3537takes precedence over the command line option.
3538
3539If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3540command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3541treated as nested sorting command.
3542
3543@enumerate
3544@item
3545@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3546@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3547@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3548@item
3549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3550@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3551@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3552@end enumerate
3553
3554If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3555command line option will be ignored.
3556
252b5132
RH
3557If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3558@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3559precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3560
3561This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3562files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3563sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3564The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3565with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3566linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3567@smallexample
3568@group
3569SECTIONS @{
3570 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3571 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3572 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3573 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3574@}
3575@end group
3576@end smallexample
3577
3578@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3579@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3580@cindex common symbol placement
3581@cindex uninitialized data placement
3582A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3583file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3584linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3585named @samp{COMMON}.
3586
3587You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3588other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3589particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3590input files are placed in another section.
3591
3592In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3593@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3594@smallexample
3595.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3596@end smallexample
3597
3598@cindex scommon section
3599@cindex small common symbols
3600Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3601example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3602symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3603different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3604the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3605symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3606to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3607locations.
3608
3609@cindex [COMMON]
3610You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3611notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3612@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3613
3614@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3615@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3616@cindex KEEP
3617@cindex garbage collection
3618When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3619it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3620This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3621with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3622@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3623
3624@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3625@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3626The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3627to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3628start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3629@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3630follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3631@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3632@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3633All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3634files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3635
3636@smallexample
3637@group
3638SECTIONS @{
3639 outputa 0x10000 :
3640 @{
3641 all.o
3642 foo.o (.input1)
3643 @}
36f63dca
NC
3644@end group
3645@group
252b5132
RH
3646 outputb :
3647 @{
3648 foo.o (.input2)
3649 foo1.o (.input1)
3650 @}
36f63dca
NC
3651@end group
3652@group
252b5132
RH
3653 outputc :
3654 @{
3655 *(.input1)
3656 *(.input2)
3657 @}
3658@}
3659@end group
a1ab1d2a 3660@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3661
3662@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3663@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3664@cindex data
3665@cindex section data
3666@cindex output section data
3667@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3668@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3669@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3670@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3671@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3672You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3673@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3674an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3675parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3676value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3677counter.
3678
3679The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3680store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3681bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3682stored.
3683
3684For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3685of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3686@smallexample
3687BYTE(1)
3688LONG(addr)
3689@end smallexample
3690
3691When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3692same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3693target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3694@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3695@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3696
3697If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3698which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3699When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3700true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3701endianness of the first input object file.
3702
36f63dca 3703Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3704between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3705@smallexample
3706SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3707@end smallexample
3708whereas this will work:
3709@smallexample
3710SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3711@end smallexample
3712
252b5132
RH
3713@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3714@cindex holes, filling
3715@cindex unspecified memory
3716You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3717current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3718otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3719gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3720with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3721necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3722point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3723than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3724different parts of an output section.
3725
3726This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3727value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3728@smallexample
563e308f 3729FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3730@end smallexample
3731
3732The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3733section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3734part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3735entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3736precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3737expression.
252b5132
RH
3738
3739@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3740@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3741There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3742commands.
3743
3744@table @code
3745@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3746@cindex input filename symbols
3747@cindex filename symbols
3748@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3749The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3750The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3751file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3752the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3753
3754This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3755normally used for any other object file format.
3756
3757@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3758@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3759@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3760@item CONSTRUCTORS
3761When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3762unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3763destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3764arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3765automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3766For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3767linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3768@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3769ignored for other object file formats.
3770
3771The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3772constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3773Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3774the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3775first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3776of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3777compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3778formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3779@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3780the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3781destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3782@code{exit}.
3783
3784For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3785arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3786addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3787and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3788linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3789runtime code expects to see.
3790
3791@smallexample
3792 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3793 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3794 *(.ctors)
3795 LONG(0)
3796 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3797 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3798 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3799 *(.dtors)
3800 LONG(0)
3801 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3802@end smallexample
3803
3804If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3805which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3806are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3807are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3808command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3809@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3810@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3811@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3812
3813Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3814and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3815need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3816scripts.
3817
3818@end table
3819
3820@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3821@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3822@cindex discarding sections
3823@cindex sections, discarding
3824@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3825The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3826for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3827be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3828@smallexample
49c13adb 3829.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3830@end smallexample
3831@noindent
3832will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3833@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3834sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3835space in an output section will also create the output section.
3836
a0976ea4 3837The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3838on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3839symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3840the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3841section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3842
3843@cindex /DISCARD/
3844The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3845input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3846section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3847
3848@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3849@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3850@cindex output section attributes
3851We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3852like this:
3853@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3854@group
7e7d5768 3855@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3856 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3857 @{
3858 @var{output-section-command}
3859 @var{output-section-command}
3860 @dots{}
562d3460 3861 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3862@end group
3863@end smallexample
3864We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3865@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3866remaining section attributes.
3867
a1ab1d2a 3868@menu
252b5132
RH
3869* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3870* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3871* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3872* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3873* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3874* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3875* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3876@end menu
3877
3878@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3879@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3880Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3881parentheses. The following types are defined:
3882
3883@table @code
3884@item NOLOAD
3885The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3886loaded into memory when the program is run.
3887@item DSECT
3888@itemx COPY
3889@itemx INFO
3890@itemx OVERLAY
3891These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3892rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3893marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3894section when the program is run.
3895@end table
3896
3897@kindex NOLOAD
3898@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3899@cindex loading, preventing
3900The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3901the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3902the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3903@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3904need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3905@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3906@smallexample
3907@group
3908SECTIONS @{
3909 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3910 @dots{}
3911@}
3912@end group
3913@end smallexample
3914
3915@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3916@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3917@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3918@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3919@cindex load address
3920@cindex section load address
3921Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3922@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3923an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3924Address}).
3925
dc0b6aa0
AM
3926The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3927the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3928
3929Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3930specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3931Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3932linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3933
3934If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3935section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3936VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3937section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3938or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3939to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3940@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3941
3942@cindex ROM initialized data
3943@cindex initialized data in ROM
3944This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3945example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3946called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3947@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3948even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3949uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3950defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3951counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3952
3953@smallexample
3954@group
3955SECTIONS
3956 @{
3957 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3958 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3959 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3960 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
3961 .bss 0x3000 :
3962 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
3963@}
3964@end group
3965@end smallexample
3966
3967The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
3968this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
3969the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
3970how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
3971script.
3972
3973@smallexample
3974@group
3975extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3976char *src = &_etext;
3977char *dst = &_data;
3978
3979/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
3980while (dst < &_edata) @{
3981 *dst++ = *src++;
3982@}
3983
3984/* Zero bss */
3985for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3986 *dst = 0;
3987@end group
3988@end smallexample
3989
bbf115d3
L
3990@node Forced Output Alignment
3991@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
3992@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
3993@cindex forcing output section alignment
3994@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 3995You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 3996
7e7d5768
AM
3997@node Forced Input Alignment
3998@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
3999@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4000@cindex forcing input section alignment
4001@cindex input section alignment
4002You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4003SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4004sections, whether larger or smaller.
4005
252b5132 4006@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4007@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4008@kindex >@var{region}
4009@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4010@cindex memory regions and sections
4011You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4012using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4013
4014Here is a simple example:
4015@smallexample
4016@group
4017MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4018SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4019@end group
4020@end smallexample
4021
4022@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4023@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4024@kindex :@var{phdr}
4025@cindex section, assigning to program header
4026@cindex program headers and sections
4027You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4028using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4029one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4030assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4031@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4032linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4033
4034Here is a simple example:
4035@smallexample
4036@group
4037PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4038SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4039@end group
4040@end smallexample
4041
4042@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4043@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4044@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4045@cindex section fill pattern
4046@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4047You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4048@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4049(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4050within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4051alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4052necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4053of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4054an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4055fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4056other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4057pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4058expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4059
4060You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4061output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4062
4063Here is a simple example:
4064@smallexample
4065@group
563e308f 4066SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4067@end group
4068@end smallexample
4069
4070@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4071@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4072@kindex OVERLAY
4073@cindex overlays
4074An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4075are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4076the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4077copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4078required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4079can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4080than another.
4081
4082Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4083@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4084output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4085command is as follows:
4086@smallexample
4087@group
4088OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4089 @{
4090 @var{secname1}
4091 @{
4092 @var{output-section-command}
4093 @var{output-section-command}
4094 @dots{}
4095 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4096 @var{secname2}
4097 @{
4098 @var{output-section-command}
4099 @var{output-section-command}
4100 @dots{}
4101 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4102 @dots{}
4103 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4104@end group
4105@end smallexample
4106
4107Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4108section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4109section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4110those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4111except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4112sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4113
4114The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4115addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4116memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4117whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4118and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4119and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4120
4121If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4122among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4123all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4124section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4125NOCROSSREFS}.
4126
4127For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4128provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4129defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4130@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4131the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4132within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4133symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4134
4135At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4136the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4137
4138Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4139@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4140@smallexample
4141@group
4142 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4143 @{
4144 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4145 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4146 @}
4147@end group
4148@end smallexample
4149@noindent
4150This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4151address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4152@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4153following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4154@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4155@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4156
4157C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4158like the following.
4159
4160@smallexample
4161@group
4162 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4163 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4164 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4165@end group
4166@end smallexample
4167
4168Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4169everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4170example could have been written identically as follows.
4171
4172@smallexample
4173@group
4174 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4175 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4176 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4177 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4178 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4179 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4180 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4181@end group
4182@end smallexample
4183
4184@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4185@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4186@kindex MEMORY
4187@cindex memory regions
4188@cindex regions of memory
4189@cindex allocating memory
4190@cindex discontinuous memory
4191The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4192memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4193
4194The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4195memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4196may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4197can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4198set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4199regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4200around to fit into the available regions.
4201
4202A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4203command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4204you wish. The syntax is:
4205@smallexample
4206@group
a1ab1d2a 4207MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4208 @{
4209 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4210 @dots{}
4211 @}
4212@end group
4213@end smallexample
4214
4215The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4216region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4217Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4218with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4219must have a distinct name.
4220
4221@cindex memory region attributes
4222The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4223whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4224not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4225@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4226section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4227the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4228them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4229
4230The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4231@table @samp
4232@item R
4233Read-only section
4234@item W
4235Read/write section
4236@item X
4237Executable section
4238@item A
4239Allocatable section
4240@item I
4241Initialized section
4242@item L
4243Same as @samp{I}
4244@item !
4245Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4246@end table
4247
4248If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4249@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4250attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4251in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4252attributes.
4253
4254@kindex ORIGIN =
4255@kindex o =
4256@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4257The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4258the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4259cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4260abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4261@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4262
4263@kindex LENGTH =
4264@kindex len =
4265@kindex l =
4266The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4267region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4268be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4269@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4270
4271In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4272available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4273and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4274linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4275is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4276or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4277explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4278region.
4279
4280@smallexample
4281@group
a1ab1d2a 4282MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4283 @{
4284 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4285 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4286 @}
4287@end group
4288@end smallexample
4289
4290Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4291specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4292@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4293a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4294output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4295was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4296the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4297output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4298region, the linker will issue an error message.
4299
3ec57632 4300It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4301expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4302@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4303
4304@smallexample
4305@group
c0065db7 4306 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4307@end group
4308@end smallexample
4309
252b5132
RH
4310@node PHDRS
4311@section PHDRS Command
4312@kindex PHDRS
4313@cindex program headers
4314@cindex ELF program headers
4315@cindex program segments
4316@cindex segments, ELF
4317The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4318@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4319loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4320program with the @samp{-p} option.
4321
4322When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4323reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4324program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4325This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4326interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4327
4328The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4329in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4330precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4331the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4332not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4333
4334The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4335generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4336ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4337
4338This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4339@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4340
4341@smallexample
4342@group
4343PHDRS
4344@{
4345 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4346 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4347@}
4348@end group
4349@end smallexample
4350
4351The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4352of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4353header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4354with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4355must have a distinct name.
4356
4357Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4358system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4359specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4360sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4361attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4362Section Phdr}.
4363
4364It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4365merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4366repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4367contain the section.
4368
4369If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4370then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4371not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4372convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4373placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4374default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4375segment at all.
4376
4377@kindex FILEHDR
4378@kindex PHDRS
4379You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4380the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4381The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4382file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4383include the ELF program headers themselves.
4384
4385The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4386value of the keyword.
4387
4388@table @asis
4389@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4390Indicates an unused program header.
4391
4392@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4393Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4394the file.
4395
4396@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4397Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4398
4399@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4400Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4401found.
4402
4403@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4404Indicates a segment holding note information.
4405
4406@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4407A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4408ABI.
4409
4410@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4411Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4412
4413@item @var{expression}
4414An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4415be used for types not defined above.
4416@end table
4417
4418You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4419in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4420@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4421Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4422output section attribute.
4423
4424The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4425which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4426explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4427an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4428header.
4429
4430Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4431headers used on a native ELF system.
4432
4433@example
4434@group
4435PHDRS
4436@{
4437 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4438 interp PT_INTERP ;
4439 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4440 data PT_LOAD ;
4441 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4442@}
4443
4444SECTIONS
4445@{
4446 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4447 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4448 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4449 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4450 @dots{}
4451 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4452 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4453 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4454 @dots{}
4455@}
4456@end group
4457@end example
4458
4459@node VERSION
4460@section VERSION Command
4461@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4462@cindex symbol versions
4463@cindex version script
4464@cindex versions of symbols
4465The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4466only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4467symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4468a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4469shared library.
4470
4471You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4472you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4473also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4474
4475The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4476@smallexample
4477VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4478@end smallexample
4479
4480The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4481Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4482version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4483version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4484version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4485scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4486library.
4487
4488The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4489examples.
4490
4491@smallexample
4492VERS_1.1 @{
4493 global:
4494 foo1;
4495 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4496 old*;
4497 original*;
4498 new*;
252b5132
RH
4499@};
4500
4501VERS_1.2 @{
4502 foo2;
4503@} VERS_1.1;
4504
4505VERS_2.0 @{
4506 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4507 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4508 ns::*;
4509 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4510 @}
252b5132
RH
4511@} VERS_1.2;
4512@end smallexample
4513
4514This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4515version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4516The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4517a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4518of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4519symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4520is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4521in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4522However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4523name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4524
4525Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4526depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4527to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4528
4529Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4530depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4531and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4532
4533When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4534specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4535unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4536unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
252b5132
RH
4537somewhere in the version script.
4538
4539The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4540they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4541could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4542However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4543
0f6bf451 4544Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4545in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4546symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4547won't.
4548
4549@smallexample
7c9c73be 4550@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4551@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4552
252b5132
RH
4553When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4554symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4555requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4556shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4557loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4558linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4559application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4560way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4561all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4562search for each symbol reference.
4563
4564The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4565doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4566that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4567functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4568the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4569required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4570that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4571versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4572the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4573
4574There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4575first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4576source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4577script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4578maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4579@smallexample
4580__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4581@end smallexample
4582@noindent
4583in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4584be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4585The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4586@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4587takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4588
4589The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4590function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4591an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4592version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4593linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4594
4595To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4596source file. Here is an example:
4597
4598@smallexample
4599__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4600__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4601__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4602__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4603@end smallexample
4604
4605In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4606unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4607example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4608@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4609
4610When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4611some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4612this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4613@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4614declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4615you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4616
4617If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4618within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4619(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4620specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4621
cb840a31
L
4622You can also specify the language in the version script:
4623
4624@smallexample
4625VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4626@end smallexample
4627
c0065db7 4628The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4629The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4630demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4631patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4632
86043bbb
MM
4633Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4634described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4635or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4636the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4637whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4638cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4639might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4640should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4641expect when you upgrade.
4642
252b5132
RH
4643@node Expressions
4644@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4645@cindex expressions
4646@cindex arithmetic
4647The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4648that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4649expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4650host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4651
4652You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4653
4654The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4655expressions.
4656
4657@menu
4658* Constants:: Constants
4659* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4660* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4661* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4662* Operators:: Operators
4663* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4664* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4665* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4666@end menu
4667
4668@node Constants
4669@subsection Constants
4670@cindex integer notation
4671@cindex constants in linker scripts
4672All constants are integers.
4673
4674As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4675octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4676hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4677
4678@cindex scaled integers
4679@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4680@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4681@cindex suffixes for integers
4682@cindex integer suffixes
4683In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4684constant by
4685@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4686@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4687@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4688@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4689@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4690@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4691@tex
4692${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4693@end tex
4694@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4695respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4696@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4697_fourk_1 = 4K;
4698_fourk_2 = 4096;
4699_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4700@end smallexample
4701
4702@node Symbols
4703@subsection Symbol Names
4704@cindex symbol names
4705@cindex names
4706@cindex quoted symbol names
4707@kindex "
4708Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4709and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4710Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4711specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4712keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4713@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4714"SECTION" = 9;
4715"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4716@end smallexample
4717
4718Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4719to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4720whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4721
ecca9871
L
4722@node Orphan Sections
4723@subsection Orphan Sections
4724@cindex orphan
4725Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4726are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4727script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4728output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4729placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4730attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4731same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4732If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4733at the end of the file.
4734
4735For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4736well as section flag.
4737
41911f68 4738If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4739the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4740__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4741section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4742orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4743representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4744character.
4745
252b5132
RH
4746@node Location Counter
4747@subsection The Location Counter
4748@kindex .
4749@cindex dot
4750@cindex location counter
4751@cindex current output location
4752The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4753current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4754location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4755within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4756anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4757
4758@cindex holes
4759Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4760moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4761location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4762and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4763doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4764
4765@smallexample
4766SECTIONS
4767@{
4768 output :
4769 @{
4770 file1(.text)
4771 . = . + 1000;
4772 file2(.text)
4773 . += 1000;
4774 file3(.text)
563e308f 4775 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4776@}
4777@end smallexample
4778@noindent
4779In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4780located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4781followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4782@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4783@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4784specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4785
5c6bbab8
NC
4786@cindex dot inside sections
4787Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4788current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4789statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4790absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4791however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4792not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4793
4794@smallexample
4795SECTIONS
4796@{
4797 . = 0x100
4798 .text: @{
4799 *(.text)
4800 . = 0x200
4801 @}
4802 . = 0x500
4803 .data: @{
4804 *(.data)
4805 . += 0x600
4806 @}
4807@}
4808@end smallexample
4809
4810The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4811and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4812the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4813much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4814move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4815and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4816the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4817the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4818
b5666f2f
AM
4819@cindex dot outside sections
4820Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4821output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4822needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4823
4824@smallexample
4825SECTIONS
4826@{
4827 start_of_text = . ;
4828 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4829 end_of_text = . ;
4830
4831 start_of_data = . ;
4832 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4833 end_of_data = . ;
4834@}
4835@end smallexample
4836
4837If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4838not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4839between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4840should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4841blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4842the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4843sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4844statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4845special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4846place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4847as follows:
4848
4849@smallexample
4850SECTIONS
4851@{
4852 start_of_text = . ;
4853 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4854 end_of_text = . ;
4855
4856 start_of_data = . ;
4857 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4858 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4859 end_of_data = . ;
4860@}
4861@end smallexample
4862
4863This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4864@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4865placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4866assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4867a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4868section. So you could write:
4869
4870@smallexample
4871SECTIONS
4872@{
4873 start_of_text = . ;
4874 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4875 end_of_text = . ;
4876
4877 . = . ;
4878 start_of_data = . ;
4879 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4880 end_of_data = . ;
4881@}
4882@end smallexample
4883
4884Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4885@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4886
252b5132
RH
4887@need 2000
4888@node Operators
4889@subsection Operators
4890@cindex operators for arithmetic
4891@cindex arithmetic operators
4892@cindex precedence in expressions
4893The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4894the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4895@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4896@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4897@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4898@smallexample
4899precedence associativity Operators Notes
4900(highest)
49011 left ! - ~ (1)
49022 left * / %
49033 left + -
49044 left >> <<
49055 left == != > < <= >=
49066 left &
49077 left |
49088 left &&
49099 left ||
491010 right ? :
491111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4912(lowest)
4913@end smallexample
4914Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4915(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4916(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4917@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4918@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4919@tex
4920\vskip \baselineskip
4921%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4922\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4923\hrule
4924\halign
4925{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4926height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4927&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4928height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4929\noalign{\hrule}
4930height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4931&highest&&&&&\cr
4932% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4933&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4934&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4935&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4936&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4937&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4938&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4939&7&&left&&|&\cr
4940&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4941&9&&left&&||&\cr
4942&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4943&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4944&lowest&&&&&\cr
4945height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4946\hrule}
4947@end tex
4948@iftex
4949{
4950@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4951@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4952@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4953}
4954@end iftex
4955@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4956
4957@node Evaluation
4958@subsection Evaluation
4959@cindex lazy evaluation
4960@cindex expression evaluation order
4961The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
4962an expression when absolutely necessary.
4963
4964The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4965address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4966regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
4967as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4968
4969However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4970until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
4971other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4972for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4973
4974The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4975assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4976allocation.
4977
4978Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4979@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
4980
4981If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4982available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
4983following
4984@smallexample
4985@group
4986SECTIONS
4987 @{
a1ab1d2a 4988 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
4989 @{ *(.text) @}
4990 @}
4991@end group
4992@end smallexample
4993@noindent
4994will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
4995address}.
4996
4997@node Expression Section
4998@subsection The Section of an Expression
4999@cindex expression sections
5000@cindex absolute expressions
5001@cindex relative expressions
5002@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5003@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5004@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5005When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5006or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5007fixed offset from the base of a section.
5008
5009The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5010whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5011an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5012section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5013
5014A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5015relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5016further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5017section will be the section of the relative expression.
5018
5019A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5020through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5021will not have any particular associated section.
5022
5023You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5024to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5025create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5026section @samp{.data}:
5027@smallexample
5028SECTIONS
5029 @{
5030 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5031 @}
5032@end smallexample
5033@noindent
5034If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5035@samp{.data} section.
5036
5037@node Builtin Functions
5038@subsection Builtin Functions
5039@cindex functions in expressions
5040The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5041use in linker script expressions.
5042
5043@table @code
5044@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5045@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5046@cindex expression, absolute
5047Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5048of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5049value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5050normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5051
5052@item ADDR(@var{section})
5053@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5054@cindex section address in expression
5055Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5056script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5057the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5058identical values:
5059@smallexample
5060@group
5061SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5062 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5063 @{
252b5132
RH
5064 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5065 @dots{}
5066 @}
5067 .output :
5068 @{
5069 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5070 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5071 @}
5072@dots{} @}
5073@end group
5074@end smallexample
5075
876f4090
NS
5076@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5077@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5078@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5079@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5080@cindex round up location counter
5081@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5082@cindex round up expression
5083@cindex align expression
5084Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5085to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5086doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5087arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5088expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5089equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5090
5091Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5092next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5093variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5094input sections:
252b5132
RH
5095@smallexample
5096@group
5097SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5098 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5099 *(.data)
5100 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5101 @}
5102@dots{} @}
5103@end group
5104@end smallexample
5105@noindent
5106The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5107a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5108a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5109of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5110
5111The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5112
362c1d1a
NS
5113@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5114@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5115@cindex section alignment
5116Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5117been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5118evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5119the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5120value in that section.
5121@smallexample
5122@group
5123SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5124 .output @{
5125 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5126 @dots{}
5127 @}
5128@dots{} @}
5129@end group
5130@end smallexample
5131
252b5132
RH
5132@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5133@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5134This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5135scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5136section.
5137
2d20f7bf
JJ
5138@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5139@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5140This is equivalent to either
5141@smallexample
5142(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5143@end smallexample
5144or
5145@smallexample
5146(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5147@end smallexample
5148@noindent
5149depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5150for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5151@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5152If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5153memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5154bytes in the on-disk file.
5155
5156This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5157any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5158@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5159be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5160working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5161
5162@noindent
5163Example:
5164@smallexample
5165 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5166@end smallexample
5167
5168@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5169@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5170This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5171evaluation purposes.
5172
5173@smallexample
5174 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5175@end smallexample
5176
a4f5ad88
JJ
5177@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5178@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5179This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5180@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5181When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5182does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5183@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5184boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5185it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5186@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5187
5188@smallexample
5189 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5190@end smallexample
5191
252b5132
RH
5192@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5193@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5194@cindex symbol defaults
5195Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5196defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5197return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5198default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5199shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5200the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5201existed, its value is preserved:
5202
5203@smallexample
5204@group
5205SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5206 .text : @{
5207 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5208 @dots{}
5209 @}
5210 @dots{}
5211@}
5212@end group
5213@end smallexample
5214
3ec57632
NC
5215@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5216@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5217Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5218
252b5132
RH
5219@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5220@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5221@cindex section load address in expression
5222Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5223the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5224attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5225Section LMA}).
5226
5227@kindex MAX
5228@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5229Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5230
5231@kindex MIN
5232@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5233Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5234
5235@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5236@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5237@cindex unallocated address, next
5238Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5239This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5240use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5241output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5242
3ec57632
NC
5243@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5244@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5245Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5246
ba916c8a
MM
5247@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5248@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5249Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5250value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5251option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5252@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5253be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5254``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5255name.
5256
252b5132
RH
5257@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5258@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5259@cindex section size
5260Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5261been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5262evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5263@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5264@smallexample
5265@group
5266SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5267 .output @{
5268 .start = . ;
5269 @dots{}
5270 .end = . ;
5271 @}
5272 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5273 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5274@dots{} @}
5275@end group
5276@end smallexample
5277
5278@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5279@itemx sizeof_headers
5280@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5281@cindex header size
5282Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5283information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5284this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5285choose, to facilitate paging.
5286
5287@cindex not enough room for program headers
5288@cindex program headers, not enough room
5289When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5290@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5291number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5292addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5293additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5294room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5295the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5296script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5297you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5298command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5299@end table
5300
5301@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5302@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5303@cindex implicit linker scripts
5304If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5305an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5306linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5307linker will report an error.
5308
5309An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5310
5311Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5312assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5313commands.
5314
5315Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5316at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5317read. This can affect archive searching.
5318
5319@ifset GENERIC
5320@node Machine Dependent
5321@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5322
5323@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5324@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5325sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5326functionality are not listed.
5327
5328@menu
36f63dca
NC
5329@ifset H8300
5330* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5331@end ifset
5332@ifset I960
5333* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5334@end ifset
5335@ifset ARM
5336* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5337@end ifset
5338@ifset HPPA
5339* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5340@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5341@ifset M68K
5342* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5343@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5344@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5345* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5346@end ifset
2469cfa2 5347@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5348* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5349@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5350@ifset M68HC11
5351* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5352@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5353@ifset POWERPC
5354* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5355@end ifset
5356@ifset POWERPC64
5357* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5358@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5359@ifset SPU
5360* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5361@end ifset
74459f0e 5362@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5363* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5364@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5365@ifset WIN32
5366* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5367@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5368@ifset XTENSA
5369* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5370@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5371@end menu
5372@end ifset
5373
252b5132
RH
5374@ifset H8300
5375@ifclear GENERIC
5376@raisesections
5377@end ifclear
5378
5379@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5380@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5381
5382@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5383For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5384you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5385
5386@table @emph
5387@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5388@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5389@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5390targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5391program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5392respectively.
5393
5394@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5395@item synthesizing instructions
5396@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5397@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5398sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5399page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5400(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5401@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5402top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5403
5404@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5405@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5406biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5407which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5408page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5409(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5410@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5411the top page of memory).
5412
5413@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5414@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
541532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5416changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5417(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5418@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5419the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5420@end table
5421
5422@ifclear GENERIC
5423@lowersections
5424@end ifclear
5425@end ifset
5426
36f63dca 5427@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5428@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5429@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5430@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5431@node Renesas
5432@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5433
c2dcd04e
NC
5434@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5435H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5436options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5437@end ifset
5438@end ifclear
5439
5440@ifset I960
5441@ifclear GENERIC
5442@raisesections
5443@end ifclear
5444
5445@node i960
5446@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5447
5448@cindex i960 support
5449
5450You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5451specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5452family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5453incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5454linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5455libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5456search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5457
5458For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5459well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5460paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5461the names
5462
5463@smallexample
5464@group
5465try
5466libtry.a
5467tryca
5468libtryca.a
5469@end group
5470@end smallexample
5471
5472@noindent
5473The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5474two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5475
5476You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5477the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5478use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5479specifies a library.
5480
5481@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5482@cindex relaxing on i960
5483@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5484you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5485@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5486them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5487instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5488instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5489target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5490not itself call any subroutines).
5491
5492@ifclear GENERIC
5493@lowersections
5494@end ifclear
5495@end ifset
5496
5497@ifset ARM
5498@ifclear GENERIC
5499@raisesections
5500@end ifclear
5501
93fd0973
SC
5502@ifset M68HC11
5503@ifclear GENERIC
5504@raisesections
5505@end ifclear
5506
5507@node M68HC11/68HC12
5508@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5509
5510@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5511
5512@subsection Linker Relaxation
5513
5514For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5515optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5516
5517@table @emph
5518@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5519@item relaxing address modes
5520@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5521targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5522program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5523respectively.
5524
5525@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5526transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5527page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5528
5529@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5530When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5531of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5532addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5533@code{bset} instructions.
5534
5535@end table
5536
5537@subsection Trampoline Generation
5538
5539@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5540@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5541For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5542call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5543will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5544trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5545case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5546point to the function trampoline.
5547
5548@ifclear GENERIC
5549@lowersections
5550@end ifclear
5551@end ifset
5552
36f63dca 5553@node ARM
3674e28a 5554@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5555
5556@cindex ARM interworking support
5557@kindex --support-old-code
5558For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5559between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5560been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5561line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5562libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5563option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5564given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5565which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5566the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5567non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5568
5569@cindex thumb entry point
5570@cindex entry point, thumb
5571@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5572The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5573@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5574But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5575branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5576executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5577
e489d0ae
PB
5578@cindex BE8
5579@kindex --be8
5580The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5581executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5582The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5583
3674e28a
PB
5584@cindex TARGET1
5585@kindex --target1-rel
5586@kindex --target1-abs
5587The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5588@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5589or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5590and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5591
5592@cindex TARGET2
5593@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5594The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5595@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5596meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5597@table @samp
5598@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5599@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5600@item abs
5601@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5602@item got-rel
5603@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5604@end table
5605
319850b4
JB
5606@cindex FIX_V4BX
5607@kindex --fix-v4bx
5608The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5609specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5610interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5611also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5612
5613In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5614linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5615@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5616
5617In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5618relocations are ignored.
5619
845b51d6
PB
5620@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5621@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5622Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5623relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5624
5625@smallexample
5626TST rM, #1
5627MOVEQ PC, rM
5628BX Rn
5629@end smallexample
5630
5631This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5632and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5633condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5634
33bfe774
JB
5635@cindex USE_BLX
5636@kindex --use-blx
5637The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5638BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5639situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5640code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5641each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5642
5643This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5644specify it if you are using that target.
5645
c6dd86c6
JB
5646@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5647@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5648The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5649bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5650instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5651to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5652the support code can read the intended values.
5653
5654The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5655intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5656and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5657intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5658full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5659you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5660
5661If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5662enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5663@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5664mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5665vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5666@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5667
5668If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5669potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5670such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5671first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5672instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5673the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5674are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5675
bf21ed78
MS
5676@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5677@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5678The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5679warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5680enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5681linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5682using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5683not be diagnosed.
5684
726150b7
NC
5685@cindex PIC_VENEER
5686@kindex --pic-veneer
5687The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5688ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5689is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5690@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5691
5692@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5693@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5694The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5695code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5696perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5697placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5698controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5699The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5700duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5701group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5702code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5703where they should be placed.
5704
5705The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5706@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5707placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5708branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5709placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5710value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5711exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5712A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5713linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5714from the input sections.
5715
5716The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5717@samp{N = +1}.
5718
1a51c1a4
NC
5719Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5720only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5721otherwise.
5722
36f63dca
NC
5723@ifclear GENERIC
5724@lowersections
5725@end ifclear
5726@end ifset
5727
5728@ifset HPPA
5729@ifclear GENERIC
5730@raisesections
5731@end ifclear
5732
5733@node HPPA ELF32
5734@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5735@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5736@kindex --multi-subspace
5737When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5738import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5739The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5740stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5741multiple sub-spaces.
5742
5743@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5744@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5745Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5746stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5747@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5748sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5749a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5750the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5751conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5752prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5753A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5754branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5755@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5756@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5757detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5758positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5759
5760Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5761single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5762create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5763large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5764
5765@ifclear GENERIC
5766@lowersections
5767@end ifclear
5768@end ifset
5769
7fb9f789
NC
5770@ifset M68K
5771@ifclear GENERIC
5772@raisesections
5773@end ifclear
5774
5775@node M68K
5776@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5777
5778@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5779@kindex --got=@var{type}
5780The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5781The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5782@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5783the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5784@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5785entries only at non-negative offsets.
5786@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5787entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5788support such GOTs.
5789@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5790output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5791file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5792files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5793
5794@ifclear GENERIC
5795@lowersections
5796@end ifclear
5797@end ifset
5798
36f63dca
NC
5799@ifset MMIX
5800@ifclear GENERIC
5801@raisesections
5802@end ifclear
5803
5804@node MMIX
5805@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5806For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5807@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5808understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5809can translate between the two formats.
5810
5811There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5812Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5813registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5814equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5815@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5816global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5817this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5818symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5819
5820Symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5821@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special;
5822there must be only one each, even if they are local. The default linker
5823script uses these to set the default start address of a section.
5824
5825Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5826are left out from an mmo file.
5827
5828@ifclear GENERIC
5829@lowersections
5830@end ifclear
5831@end ifset
5832
5833@ifset MSP430
5834@ifclear GENERIC
5835@raisesections
5836@end ifclear
5837
5838@node MSP430
5839@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5840For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5841will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5842just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5843
5844@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5845The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5846
5847@table @code
5848@item @samp{.vectors}
5849Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5850
5851@item @samp{.bootloader}
5852Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5853in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5854
5855@item @samp{.infomem}
5856Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5857this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5858
c0065db7 5859@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5860This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5861in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5862
5863@item @samp{.noinit}
5864Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5865
c0065db7 5866The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5867@end table
5868
5869@ifclear GENERIC
5870@lowersections
5871@end ifclear
5872@end ifset
5873
2a60a7a8
AM
5874@ifset POWERPC
5875@ifclear GENERIC
5876@raisesections
5877@end ifclear
5878
5879@node PowerPC ELF32
5880@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5881@cindex PowerPC long branches
5882@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5883Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5884displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5885@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5886@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5887the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5888section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5889section exceeds 33M in size.
5890
5891@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5892@table @option
5893@cindex PowerPC PLT
5894@kindex --bss-plt
5895@item --bss-plt
5896Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5897generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5898the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5899writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5900@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5901PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5902compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5903BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5904
016687f8
AM
5905@kindex --secure-plt
5906@item --secure-plt
5907@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5908@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5909when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5910layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5911style BSS PLT.
5912
2a60a7a8
AM
5913@cindex PowerPC GOT
5914@kindex --sdata-got
5915@item --sdata-got
5916The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5917sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5918@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5919section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5920@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5921@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5922@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5923@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5924PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5925pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5926GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5927really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5928
5929@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5930@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5931@item --emit-stub-syms
5932This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5933symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5934
5935@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5936@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5937@item --no-tls-optimize
5938PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5939sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5940disable the optimization.
5941@end table
5942
5943@ifclear GENERIC
5944@lowersections
5945@end ifclear
5946@end ifset
5947
5948@ifset POWERPC64
5949@ifclear GENERIC
5950@raisesections
5951@end ifclear
5952
5953@node PowerPC64 ELF64
5954@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5955
5956@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
5957@table @option
5958@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
5959@kindex --stub-group-size
5960@item --stub-group-size
5961Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
5962by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5963@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5964sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5965a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5966the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5967conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5968prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5969A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5970branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5971@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5972@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5973detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5974positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5975
5976Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5977single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5978create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5979large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5980
5981@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
5982@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5983@item --emit-stub-syms
5984This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5985symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5986
5987@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
5988@kindex --dotsyms
5989@kindex --no-dotsyms
5990@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
5991These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
5992in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
5993function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
5994code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
5995properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
5996to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
5997@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
5998dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
5999feature.
6000
6001@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6002@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6003@item --no-tls-optimize
6004PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6005sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6006disable the optimization.
6007
6008@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6009@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6010@item --no-opd-optimize
6011PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6012corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6013the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6014Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6015
6016@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6017@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6018@item --non-overlapping-opd
6019Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6020@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6021the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6022entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6023
6024@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6025@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6026@item --no-toc-optimize
6027PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6028entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6029reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6030marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6031marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6032relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6033unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6034reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6035discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6036reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6037code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6038optimization.
6039
6040@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6041@kindex --no-multi-toc
6042@item --no-multi-toc
6043By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6044entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6045total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6046grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6047TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6048calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6049help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
605064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6051Use this option to turn off this feature.
6052@end table
6053
6054@ifclear GENERIC
6055@lowersections
6056@end ifclear
6057@end ifset
6058
49fa1e15
AM
6059@ifset SPU
6060@ifclear GENERIC
6061@raisesections
6062@end ifclear
6063
6064@node SPU ELF
6065@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6066
6067@cindex SPU ELF options
6068@table @option
6069
6070@cindex SPU plugins
6071@kindex --plugin
6072@item --plugin
6073This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6074
6075@cindex SPU overlays
6076@kindex --no-overlays
6077@item --no-overlays
6078Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6079regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6080@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6081turns off all this special overlay handling.
6082
6083@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6084@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6085@item --emit-stub-syms
6086This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6087symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6088
6089@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6090@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6091@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6092This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6093function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6094on calls to non-overlay regions.
6095
6096@cindex SPU local store size
6097@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6098@item --local-store=lo:hi
6099@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6100the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6101range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6102
c0065db7 6103@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6104@kindex --stack-analysis
6105@item --stack-analysis
6106SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6107unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6108under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6109@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6110@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6111determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6112for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6113for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6114for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6115find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6116and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6117under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6118dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6119is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6120and calls will be given.
6121
c0065db7 6122@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6123@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6124@item --emit-stack-syms
6125This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6126in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6127These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6128functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6129functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6130such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6131The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6132@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6133@end table
6134
6135@ifclear GENERIC
6136@lowersections
6137@end ifclear
6138@end ifset
6139
36f63dca
NC
6140@ifset TICOFF
6141@ifclear GENERIC
6142@raisesections
6143@end ifclear
6144
6145@node TI COFF
6146@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6147@cindex TI COFF versions
6148@kindex --format=@var{version}
6149The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6150TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6151also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6152format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6153header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6154
6155@ifclear GENERIC
6156@lowersections
6157@end ifclear
6158@end ifset
6159
2ca22b03
NC
6160@ifset WIN32
6161@ifclear GENERIC
6162@raisesections
6163@end ifclear
6164
6165@node WIN32
6166@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6167
c0065db7 6168This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6169See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6170command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6171
6172@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6173@cindex import libraries
6174@item import libraries
69da35b5 6175The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6176libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6177regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6178archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6179support for creating such libraries provided with the
6180@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6181
c0065db7
RM
6182@item exporting DLL symbols
6183@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6184The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6185
6186@table @emph
6187@item using auto-export functionality
6188@cindex using auto-export functionality
6189By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6190which is controlled by the following command line options:
6191
0a5d968e
NC
6192@itemize
6193@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6194@item --exclude-symbols
6195@item --exclude-libs
6196@end itemize
6197
c0065db7 6198If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6199command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6200if either of the following are true:
6201
6202@itemize
6203@item A DEF file is used.
6204@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6205@end itemize
dc8465bf 6206
c0065db7
RM
6207@item using a DEF file
6208@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6209Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6210an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6211exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6212name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6213command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6214
6215@example
6216gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6217@end example
6218
0a5d968e
NC
6219Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6220@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6221
dc8465bf
NC
6222Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6223
6224@example
4b5bd4e7 6225LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6226
6227EXPORTS
6228foo
6229bar
6230_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6231another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6232var1 DATA
c0065db7 6233@end example
dc8465bf 6234
4b5bd4e7
DS
6235This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6236symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6237alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6238by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6239@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6240@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6241
6b31ad16
DS
6242The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6243name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6244the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6245
b45619c0
NC
6246When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6247library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6248@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6249executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6250
6251With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6252specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6253non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6254
6255If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6256or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6257filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6258
4b5bd4e7
DS
6259The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6260
6261@example
6262EXPORTS
6263 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6264 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6265 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6266@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6267
6268Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6269@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6270@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6271@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6272Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6273@samp{<integer>} alias.
6274
6275The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6276
6277@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6278will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6279by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6280linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6281library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6282
6283@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6284The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6285the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6286@code{*_imp__foo}).
6287
6288@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6289well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6290read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6291variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6292the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6293extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6294application will behave unexpectedly.
6295
6296@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6297it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6298symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6299API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6300the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6301
4b5bd4e7
DS
6302See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6303other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6304
6305@cindex creating a DEF file
6306While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6307with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6308
6309@item Using decorations
6310@cindex Using decorations
6311Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6312itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6313declared as:
6314
6315@example
6316__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6317__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6318@end example
6319
6320All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6321any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6322this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6323the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6324
6325Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6326decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6327instead:
6328
6329@example
6330__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6331__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6332@end example
6333
c0065db7
RM
6334This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6335when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6336variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6337code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6338of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6339omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6340@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6341information.
c0065db7 6342@end table
dc8465bf 6343
2ca22b03
NC
6344@cindex automatic data imports
6345@item automatic data imports
6346The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6347by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6348compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6349issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6350code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6351c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6352initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6353decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6354platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6355command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6356The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6357suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6358trigger the feature's use.
6359
c0065db7 6360auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6361additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6362
c0065db7 6363"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6364documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6365
c0065db7
RM
6366The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6367occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6368One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6369below.
6370
6371@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6372For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6373object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6374offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6375field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6376in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6377without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6378The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6379references.
6380
c0065db7
RM
6381The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6382be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6383themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6384runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6385compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6386support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6387run without error on an older system.
6388
c0065db7
RM
6389@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6390enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6391
6392@cindex direct linking to a dll
6393@item direct linking to a dll
6394The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6395including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6396libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6397traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6398libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6399function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6400though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6401storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6402tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6403large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6404
c0065db7 6405Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6406@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6407of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6408perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6409select the dll instead of an import library.
6410
2ca22b03 6411
69da35b5
NC
6412For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6413to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6414
6415@example
45e948fe
NC
6416libxxx.dll.a
6417xxx.dll.a
6418libxxx.a
6419xxx.lib
69da35b5 6420cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6421libxxx.dll
6422xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6423@end example
6424
69da35b5
NC
6425before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6426
c0065db7
RM
6427(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6428where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6429@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6430file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6431@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6432
c0065db7
RM
6433Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6434@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6435was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6436various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6437could coexist on the same machine.
6438
2ca22b03
NC
6439The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6440applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6441libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6442
6443@example
6444bin/
6445 cygxxx.dll
6446lib/
6447 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6448 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6449@end example
6450
c0065db7
RM
6451Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6452done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6453
64541. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6455@example
6456gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6457@end example
2ca22b03 6458
69da35b5
NC
6459However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6460(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6461@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6462not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6463
2ca22b03
NC
64642. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6465directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6466should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6467making the app/dll.
6468
6469@example
6470ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6471@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6472
6473Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6474
6475@example
6476gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6477@end example
69da35b5
NC
6478
6479This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6480perfectly legal
6481
6482@example
6483bin/
6484 cygxxx-5.dll
6485lib/
c0065db7 6486 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6487@end example
6488
dc8465bf 6489Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6490even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6491@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6492
6493Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6494wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6495
64961. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6497work with auto-imported data.
6498
dc8465bf
NC
64992. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6500import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6501symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6502for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6503possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6504
45e948fe
NC
65053. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6506critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6507in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6508stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6509
69da35b5 6510So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6511true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6512a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6513binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6514massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6515requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6516will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6517
c0065db7 6518@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6519@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6520@item adding additional names
6521Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6522A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6523exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6524when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6525import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6526
c0065db7 6527@example
dc8465bf
NC
6528LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6529
6530EXPORTS
c0065db7 6531foo
dc8465bf 6532_foo = foo
c0065db7 6533@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6534
6535The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6536
6537Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6538source code using the "weak" attribute:
6539
c0065db7
RM
6540@example
6541void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6542void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6543@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6544
6545See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6546symbols.
6547
6548@item renaming symbols
6549Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6550kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6551@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6552DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6553created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6554
c0065db7 6555@example
dc8465bf
NC
6556LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6557
6558EXPORTS
6559_foo = foo
c0065db7 6560@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6561
6562The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6563@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6564@end table
dc8465bf 6565
0a5d968e 6566Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6567unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6568If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6569@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6570that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6571@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6572renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6573to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6574the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6575In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6576which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6577
6578@cindex weak externals
6579@item weak externals
6580The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6581weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6582defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6583are three variants of weak externals:
6584@itemize
6585@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6586called lazy externals.
6587@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6588This form is not presently implemented.
6589@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6590implemented.
6591@end itemize
6592As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6593are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6594uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6595@end table
6596
6597@ifclear GENERIC
6598@lowersections
6599@end ifclear
6600@end ifset
6601
e0001a05
NC
6602@ifset XTENSA
6603@ifclear GENERIC
6604@raisesections
6605@end ifclear
6606
6607@node Xtensa
6608@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6609
6610@cindex Xtensa processors
6611The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6612@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6613specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6614keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6615example, with the command:
6616
6617@smallexample
6618SECTIONS
6619@{
6620 .text : @{
6621 *(.literal .text)
6622 @}
6623@}
6624@end smallexample
6625
6626@noindent
6627@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6628and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6629literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6630interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6631group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6632files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6633and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6634
43cd72b9 6635@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6636@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6637Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6638provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6639is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6640literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6641will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6642location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6643the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6644unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6645@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6646range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6647
6648For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6649to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6650instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6651instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6652instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6653@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6654hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6655By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6656switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6657density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6658instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6659performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6660linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6661a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6662
6663The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6664control the linker:
6665
6666@cindex Xtensa options
6667@table @option
e0001a05 6668@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6669@item --no-relax
6670Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6671by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6672relaxation.
6673
6674@item --size-opt
6675When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6676more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6677no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6678alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6679preserve the correctness of the code.
6680@end table
e0001a05
NC
6681
6682@ifclear GENERIC
6683@lowersections
6684@end ifclear
6685@end ifset
6686
252b5132
RH
6687@ifclear SingleFormat
6688@node BFD
6689@chapter BFD
6690
6691@cindex back end
6692@cindex object file management
6693@cindex object formats available
6694@kindex objdump -i
6695The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6696These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6697object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6698format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6699it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6700associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6701object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6702(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6703list all the formats available for your configuration.
6704
6705@cindex BFD requirements
6706@cindex requirements for BFD
6707As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6708several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6709BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6710formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6711been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6712BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6713may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6714
6715One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6716mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6717useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6718conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6719
6720@menu
6721* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6722@end menu
6723
6724@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6725@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6726@cindex opening object files
6727@include bfdsumm.texi
6728@end ifclear
6729
6730@node Reporting Bugs
6731@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6732@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6733@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6734
ff5dcc92 6735Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6736
6737Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6738it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6739to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6740work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6741@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6742
6743In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6744information that enables us to fix the bug.
6745
6746@menu
6747* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6748* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6749@end menu
6750
6751@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6752@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6753@cindex bug criteria
6754
6755If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6756
6757@itemize @bullet
6758@cindex fatal signal
6759@cindex linker crash
6760@cindex crash of linker
6761@item
6762If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6763@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6764
6765@cindex error on valid input
6766@item
ff5dcc92 6767If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6768
6769@cindex invalid input
6770@item
ff5dcc92 6771If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6772may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6773object files are correct.
6774
6775@item
6776If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6777improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6778@end itemize
6779
6780@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6781@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6782@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6783@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6784
6785A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6786products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6787recommend you contact that organization first.
6788
6789You can find contact information for many support companies and
6790individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6791distribution.
6792
ad22bfe8 6793@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6794Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6795@value{BUGURL}.
6796@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6797
6798The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6799@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6800fact or leave it out, state it!
6801
6802Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6803problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6804assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6805matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6806the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6807location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6808were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6809into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6810specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6811and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6812
6813Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6814the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6815on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6816
6817Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6818bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6819respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6820You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6821
6822To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6823
6824@itemize @bullet
6825@item
ff5dcc92 6826The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6827the @samp{--version} argument.
6828
6829Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6830the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6831
6832@item
ff5dcc92 6833Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6834patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6835
6836@item
6837The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6838version number.
6839
6840@item
ff5dcc92 6841What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6842``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6843
6844@item
6845The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6846observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6847list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6848sufficient.
6849
6850If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6851and then we might not encounter the bug.
6852
6853@item
6854A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6855bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6856provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6857bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6858state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6859requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6860we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6861attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6862
6863If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6864@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6865object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6866@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6867how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6868
6869@item
6870A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6871incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6872
ff5dcc92 6873Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6874will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6875not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6876a chance to make a mistake.
6877
6878Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6879say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6880copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6881C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6882and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6883fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6884you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6885any conclusion from our observations.
6886
6887@item
ff5dcc92 6888If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6889diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6890@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6891If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6892context, not by line number.
6893
6894The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6895sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6896@end itemize
6897
6898Here are some things that are not necessary:
6899
6900@itemize @bullet
6901@item
6902A description of the envelope of the bug.
6903
6904Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6905which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6906changes will not affect it.
6907
6908This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6909will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6910with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6911We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6912
6913Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6914of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6915output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6916less time, and so on.
6917
6918However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6919report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6920
6921@item
6922A patch for the bug.
6923
6924A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6925the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6926a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6927to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6928
ff5dcc92 6929Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6930construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6931through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6932able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6933fixed.
6934
6935And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6936patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6937help us to understand.
6938
6939@item
6940A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6941
6942Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6943things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6944@end itemize
6945
6946@node MRI
6947@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
6948@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
6949To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
6950linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
6951alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
6952described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
6953simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 6954@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
6955linker commands; these commands are described here.
6956
6957In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
6958file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6959features to make use of them.
6960
6961You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6962@samp{-c} command-line option.
6963
6964Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6965command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6966blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 6967MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
6968issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6969
6970Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
6971
6972You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6973lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
6974The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6975
6976@table @code
6977@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
6978@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
6979@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 6980Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
6981the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
6982@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
6983your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
6984script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
6985commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
6986input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
6987@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
6988
6989@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
6990@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
6991Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
6992in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
6993
6994@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
6995
6996@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
6997@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
6998Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
6999@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7000
7001@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7002@item BASE @var{expression}
7003Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7004absolute addresses) in the output file.
7005
7006@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7007@item CHIP @var{expression}
7008@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7009This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7010
7011@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7012@item END
7013This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7014
7015@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7016@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7017Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7018language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7019
7020@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7021@item
252b5132
RH
7022S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7023
7024@item
7025IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7026
7027@item
7028COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7029@samp{COFF}
7030@end enumerate
7031
7032@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7033@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7034Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7035@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7036
7037The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7038same line, with no change in its effect.
7039
7040@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7041@item LOAD @var{filename}
7042@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7043Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7044same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7045command line.
7046
7047@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7048@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7049@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7050MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7051option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7052
7053@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7054@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7055@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7056Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7057order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7058script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7059sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7060file, in the order specified.
7061
7062@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7063@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7064@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7065@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7066Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7067@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7068
7069@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7070@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7071@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7072@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7073You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7074specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7075If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7076@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7077@end table
7078
36f63dca 7079@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7080
370b66a1
CD
7081@node LD Index
7082@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7083
7084@printindex cp
7085
7086@tex
7087% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7088% meantime:
7089\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7090\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7091\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7092\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7093\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7094\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7095\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7096\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7097\page\colophon
7098% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7099@end tex
7100
252b5132 7101@bye
This page took 0.822574 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.